Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. 3 . The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Germany. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing fixtures. and piping. such as duct. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical.

you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Metric file names have an _m suffix. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. For example. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. as well as how to open and save them. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. However. When you open a training file. and tags. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After completing each exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. such as templates and families. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. when you add ductwork. So. and sheets to document the project. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. You do not design entire systems. Create detail views. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. however. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . NOTE Depending on your installation. In this exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. templates. Contact your CAD manager for more information. to provide a richer and more finished design. On the Contents tab. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. annotations. views. Create schedules. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you can choose to save your work. When you install the training files as instructed. you learn where the training files are located. your Training folder may be in a different location.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 8 If you have made changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and you can open any supported file type. and click Save. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For example. 3 In the right pane.rvt. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. select the folder in which to save the new file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. For Files of type. 4 Click the training file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. enter the new file name. click ➤ Save As. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt and make changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click the Training Files icon. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. double-click Imperial or Metric. For File name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. scroll down. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. sections. drawing sheets. the parameter is one of association or connection. the hierarchy of elements. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and plans. and phases when you need it. In this case. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. and schedules required for a building project. ■ ■ 7 . If you move the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. scope. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 2D and 3D view. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. hence. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You learn the terminology. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. quantities. every drawing sheet. In the Revit MEP model. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawings. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides.

Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. tags. and electrical panels. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ducts. walls and ceilings are hosts. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. dimensions. For example. and 2D detail components. dimensions. They help to describe or document the design. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. levels. boilers. For example. sprinklers. When you change something. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. filled regions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. For example. tags. sinks. grids. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. ducts. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and keynotes are annotation elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. boilers. They display in relevant views of the design. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and reference planes are datum elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site.

This information includes components used to design the model. section views. programming is not required. To place levels. from geometry to construction data. and so forth). Most often. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and types. top of wall. By using a single project file. However. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and ceilings. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. families. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. first floor. or bottom of foundation. In Revit MEP. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. For example. In other cases. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. such as roofs. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. North . Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Project: In Revit MEP.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. and drawings of the design. elevation views. views of the project. you do nothing to establish these relationships. The project file contains all information for the building design. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. floors. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Understanding the Concepts | 9 .

Type: Each family can have several types. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). You can also display several project views at one time. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Unlike system and standard component families. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. With a few clicks. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). identical use. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families can be transferred between projects. System families include ducts. showing. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Then experiment with them. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and wires. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. For example. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. However. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. pipes.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. or layer the views to see only the one on top. each in-place family contains only a single type. hiding. A type can also be a style. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. A type can be a specific size of a family.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. select the tool first. architect-specific tools.. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and CAD files. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. When working on the Modify tab. then select what you want to modify. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. data and systems. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and settings. tools used for editing existing elements.

The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays frequently used tools. To keep a panel expanded. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. For example. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. when adding duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides access to common tools. provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. closes the application menu (double-click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .

(Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. click.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. such as Export and Publish... select a file to open. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing..

family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.On the application menu. family. click. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . but is not enabled by default. saves a current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. (Print) access product and license information. (Publish) print the current drawing.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. and Walkthrough. Camera. publish the current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. to. provides views including Default 3D. (Licensing) close the file. To enable or disable a tool item. annotation. or template file.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. However. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. displaying the same information. In addition. This displays the command history in a list. When you are highlighting an element or component.To undo or redo a series of operations. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. When you are using a command. workshared components. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Starting with the most recent command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To show the Status Bar again. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. repeat the command. Modify. check the Status Bar. To hide the Status Bar. when you switch to another editing mode. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Clear the Status Bar check mark. Group. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.

select one or more elements of the same category. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . To change existing elements to a different type.To cancel or exit the current command. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. For example. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

click . 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click in the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Modifying the View | 19 . If you do not have a wheel mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 9 To display SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. In the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

➤ Options. As you move the mouse. and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. Click and drag to orbit the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the SteeringWheels tab. For more information about SteeringWheels. To define settings for SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. called drag controls. bottoms. Similar controls. as shown. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and select the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . These are the drag controls. 2 Enter ZR. and open Level 2 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.HVAC Plan . display along the ends. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.Design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Small blue dots. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. After you are familiar with these tasks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.

22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the first item in the list. Move. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 6 On the Undo menu. click the Undo command.

10 Move the cursor to the right. After selecting the element to move. In this case. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. Some commands. you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. for example. 11 With the duct already selected. and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy. as shown.

16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. For example.Return.Supply. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Enter VG. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

and click Open. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and modify system settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. the default building levels and standard views.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to start a project from a template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 27 . click Training files. system families. click Browse. You can either select a template from the template library. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You can choose from several templates. such as ducts and pipes. select Project. and geometry from the starting template. such as coordination review and interference checking. under Template file. such as the default project units and settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Finally. use copy/monitor. under Create new. 5 In the New Project dialog.rte template. 6 Click OK. New projects inherit all the families. and loadable families. settings. create and manage views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. In that case. link files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files.

Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. When you select the material. Click Cancel. Click OK twice. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. and open North. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Browse). select Level 1. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the Choose Template dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click Browse. If you want to use a template other than the default. under Energy Analysis. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click OK. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. select Manchester. NH. For Location. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 8 In the drawing area. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. For example. you can select it now. create another new project using the Construction template. review the construction materials listed. click Edit. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Energy Data. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for City.rte template and click Open. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ For Building Construction. (Browse). 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.7 In the Project Browser. navigate to Imperial Templates. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 10 Using the same method. select Project template. select School or University.

plumbing.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 5 1/2". 4 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. piping. 22 In the right pane. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Click OK twice. for 3 1/2". Holding CTRL. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. select Views. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 3 1/2". click Wiring. for 3/4". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click Round. under Pipe Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. click Sizes. 24 In the right pane. 11 1/2". under Duct Settings. wiring. click Rectangular. 4 1/2". and 12 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. For Categories. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. power distribution systems. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Identity Data. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 23 In the left pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 27 Click OK. and fire protection systems. under Duct Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 10 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK. 26 In the right pane.

Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. For Then by.rvt. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. and groups that are contained in a project. For Then by. under Template file. You need to create the MEP model for the project. For Sort by. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Auto . 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. To enable this coordination. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Sub-Discipline. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. In addition. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 38 Close the file. sheets. click Training.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Click Open. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system.Origin to Origin. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. under Create new. families. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. From the Positioning list. select Family and Type. select Associated Level. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select View Name. click Browse. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click the My Library icon. ➤ Open. click My Library. and click Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. Load. and click (Browse). 15 Under Library Name. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and change the name to My Library. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

20 Click ➤ Options.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 22 Select My Library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 3 Under Settings. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Edit. specify the new location here. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. select Ignore words in uppercase. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 19 Click Cancel. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click the Spelling tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and decal image files. click OK. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. This path is determined during installation. 27 Click OK. view the current path. 11 In the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . such as bump maps. 21 On the File Locations tab. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. If you work in a large office. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. If you want to relocate this path. custom color files. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Places. 5 In the text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 24 In the Options dialog. 20 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. work with snapping turned off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 21 Under Personal dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . you modify snap settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.. and enter 1 . click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. under Template file. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Training Files. click Restore Defaults. 19 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 23 In the text editor. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments.rte. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Close. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 25 Close the file without saving it. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Browse. under Dimension Snaps. click the Spelling tab. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. As you zoom in and out within a view.17 In the Spelling dialog. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit.

After you click to place the object at the midpoint. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. If it does not. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. deselect Chain. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse. and move the cursor to the right. If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. For example.

and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. with or without saving it. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. it will snap to the endpoints. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and delete the value 1’ . If you move the cursor along the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and the wall edges. 25 Click OK. 19 Enter SM. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.

43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

duct system and a hydronic piping system. methodology. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After applying a color scheme to the zones.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 45 . This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. you will understand the process. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you first configure the linked architectural model. At the end of the tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.autodesk. water source heat pump (WSHP). and then you create a plenum level. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this exercise. By following the recommended workflow. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. As you create the mechanical system. After finishing each exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. This system consists of a cooling tower. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you first plan the system.

5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. under Constraints. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. select Room Bounding. and click OK.rvt. not in the MEP training file. roof. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Next. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. NOTE When working with a linked file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ceilings. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you add a level for plenums. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.

The new level is placed. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).6 In the Project Browser. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. enter 8'. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click Plan View Types. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Esc. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). For Offset. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and click OK. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.MEP. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and double-click West . 9 On the Draw panel. and enter Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.

Under Extents. In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you can choose to save your work. for View Range. select MEP . select Level Above (Level 3). you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. and for Offset.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you place spaces in areas of the building model. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.Plenum. enter 0. and click Apply Default View Template. However. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for Level. select Design. In the next exercise. For Cut plane. and then place spaces in various types of areas. for View Scale. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. For View Classification. For Sub-Discipline. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 20 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0". ■ Click OK twice. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Properties. for Top. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for Default View Template. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Plenum Plan. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Space. For Offset. and ceilings). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. walls. For Upper Limit. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. select Level 2 Plenum. For (Tag Location). indicating that it’s the active view. enter 0. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

7 Click to place the space. For Name. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter Library. enter 219. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Click OK. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.

select Level 3. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 23 Click OK. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. and then press Esc. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . enter 0. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.

notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. enter Corridor. and scroll to the newly placed space. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. 9 In the floor plan. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the plan view would have updated with the changes.7 In the Project Browser. as shown. which was numbered 219Q. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. In the schedule. change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Using the same method. double-click the space name. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.rvt. If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Space Plan is highlighted. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.

for Upper Limit. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Level 3. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 4'. select Roof Level. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. right-click. enter Chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. In the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Interior and Reference.4 Press Esc. 6 Enter VG. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. For Number. enter 0. enter 225PC. 10 In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Offset. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click in the chase area to place the space. Under Identity Data. for Name. select the space. For Limit Offset. expand Spaces. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. ceilings. and maximize the view. 15 Press Esc. floors. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Space Tag With Volume. under Loaded Tags. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next exercises. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.Bounding elements (such as walls. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Space Plan.

Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In this exercise. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . under Spaces. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click View ➤ Zones. After a space is placed in an area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning is highlighted. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. which removes the space from the Default zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you assign spaces to zones in the building. select Occupiable. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Next. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you can add or remove a space from the zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and modify the zone properties. click Training Files. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Instruction 221. The Zone tool is active. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis.Zoning is highlighted. the Edit Zone tab displays. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the drawing area. select Computer Lab 222. The graphic in the System Browser updates. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. Using the Edit Zone tab.5 In the System Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. As you do this. under Spaces.rvt. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. and a new zone is created. and click Finish Editing Zone.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility.In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). type VG. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Instruction. 5 With the drawing area active.

and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Finish Editing Zone. click Reference. under Identity Data. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zone in the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 In the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. for Name. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.rvt.West . and click OK. enter 2 . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. To display space reference lines.Zoning. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Area B. You activated zone visibility in the views. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. expand 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Spaces. 11 Close the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.

Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2".5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. click in the Level 2 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. zoom out.Zoning view.

and zone information. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. click the corner where the Top. you verify the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. double-click the zone tag. for Name Value. enter Lounge . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. on the ViewCube. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Front. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.East. click Training Files. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. space. double-click Level 1 .rvt.Zoning view. In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .

You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Using the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). you isolate the space. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. and select 109 Lounge. Next.

and in the Electrical Loads dialog. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Construction Type. click . 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 1_South_Lounge. For People. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. scroll down in the left pane. the space information displays for the selected space. Next. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK.■ On the Details tab. click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and click OK. and in the People dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Electrical Loads. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. ■ ■ ■ Next. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 109 Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space.

you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the cooling set point. For Cooling Information.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. heating air temperature.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : 54.00 °F : 90. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the heating set point. outdoor air per area. and other room-bounding components. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Below the list of spaces and zones. and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. floors. roofs. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.00 °F : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click (Shading). and air changes per hour. Next. For Heating Information. 12 Using the methods learned previously. verify that 70. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and humidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that 74. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .

notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. for Number. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. For Offset. enter 212P. 15 In the Project Browser. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Level 3. For Name. click Cancel. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Under Energy Analysis. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select Plenum. enter 0. open MEP . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).

25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Space Plan. and verify that the space has replaced the void. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and select space Plenum 212P. verify that Manchester. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. On the Place tab. click Training Files. For Location. double-click Level 2 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select School or University. For Postal Code.rvt.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. NH. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. for Energy Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis. click Edit. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verified building. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In this exercise. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. enter 03101. space. for City. click in the Value field.

For Latent. or neither. select space Library 219. this option adjusts the times automatically. enter 150 Btu/h. select Library . For Sensible. click Edit. verify that 1' 0" is specified. and click Element Properties. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click . right-click. verify that New Construction is selected. and enter 50 sq. If. For Ground Plane. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and click OK. In order to select a space. For Project Phase. 8 In the drawing area. for Building Service. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. for Values. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). you need to select this option. and click OK. For Export Complexity.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and click OK. verify that Occupiable is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Sliver Space Tolerance. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Space Type.Audio Visual. a cooling load. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Click OK twice. verify that Level 1 is selected. select Specified. enter 200 Btu/h. For People. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that <Building> is specified. For Building Construction. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. click in the Value column. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Condition Type. under Volume Computations. ft. for Values. select Heated and cooled. Select Area per person. select Specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. both.

11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Manchester. and click OK. for Values. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Information). There should be no warnings displayed. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You have verified the building information. verify that <Building> is specified.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. For Building Service. for Values. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and can be modified here. Next. 12 Click the Details tab. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Actual. and under Heating Information. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Under Power. click Edit. NH. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Calculate. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select Actual. You should correct the space error in the building model. is specified. For Location. For Building Construction. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . For Electrical Loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. Select the space associated with the warning. select 219 Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations.

For Color Scheme. 19 In the drawing area. 16 After you review the loads report.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . or make any changes to the model. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. or zone information. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK.Space Plan. space.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. select 219 Library. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. space. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 21 Click OK. and a loads report displays. 15 Review the loads report for project. weather. and zone information for the building model. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . select HVAC Zones. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 3 In the drawing area. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click Training Files.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click to the right of the building to place the legend.

Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. select Tonnage Range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

In this exercise. select Spaces. more category options are available. for Select available fields from. select Spaces. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Select Schedule building components. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.rvt. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Phase. select New Construction. In the next exercise. Click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.Space Fill is the active view. enter Space Airflow Schedule. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. click Training Files.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ ■ Using the method learned previously.■ Under Available fields. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Airflow Delta. select Level. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Type. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Then by.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Fields dialog. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Not Between. for Formula. enter Airflow Delta. select Number. Header. and then select Hidden field. and click OK. For Formula. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ Click Calculated Value. Select Ascending. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Fields. enter . Click OK. click (Browse). select Level. and then click . and then click Conditional Format. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select HVAC. select Air Flow. Select Formula. and Blank line. For Discipline. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Calculated Value dialog.

In the next lesson. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. For Background Color. a view opens that contains the selected space. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In this exercise. ■ The schedule displays. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. click the color swatch. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. right-click to access schedule properties. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. verify that Show is highlighted. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. In the Color dialog. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select red. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Click OK twice. and click OK. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.■ ■ ■ For Value. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

78 .

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you will create supply air systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. In this lesson. As you place the air terminals. Then. After system creation. and work with the airflow schedule.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 In the ceiling view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. If the host element is modified or moved. click Place on Face. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck . Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and press Enter. enter 425 CFM. and then press Esc to end the command. and select Supply Diffuser . type 12. 17 Move the cursor down. the hosted elements are updated as well. for Flow. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 9 On the Placement panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 15 On the Options Bar. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. as shown. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes. clear Leader. 27 Select Return Diffuser . navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Next. and click Open.rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers. As you place the return diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. select one of the diffusers. click Place on Face. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.

Level. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. as shown.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click to select the lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select one of the return diffusers. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Strong Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. click Yes. under Other. and click OK. 31 In the alert dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and click OK. for Constraints ➤ Offset. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. indicating that it’s the active view. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.HVAC Plan . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Press Esc. In this exercise. When you highlight a space. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. right-click the title. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. including energy analysis. click Training Files. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.rvt. However.Design is highlighted. You then create the logical connection between the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display.

expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. review the Number of Elements. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. System Name. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Connect Into. As you add diffusers to systems. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 11 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . On the Options Bar. and Flow value. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the number of elements is updated. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 12 In the System Browser. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 15 Click Cancel.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. under Identity Data. In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Rename the system Next. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). which updates the name in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. and the system connects them. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for System Name. 18 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Click OK. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. for Mark. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.17 Using the method learned previously. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In this exercise. under Mechanical. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the upper left diffuser. In this case. the Network type provides several solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. A Generate Layout tab displays. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Network. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.HVAC Plan. click Training Files. and display solution 1. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the space crossing lines display. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. which provides various layout tools.rvt. Also. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 4 In the drawing area. for Solution Type.

9 On the Generate Layout panel. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Click OK.7 On the Options Bar. click Settings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Round. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. Select Branch. For Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Flex Duct Type. enter 3'. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Offset. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. you’ll get an error in a later step. click Modify. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . as shown. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.

11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . For example. as is the elbow itself.

You can delete ductwork and the system remains. under Graphics. fittings. and click OK. select Duct Color Fill . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. but not all values are used in this view. and equipment. If the entire network does not highlight. a disconnection exists. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and then click OK. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and click to select it.Flow. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. The first time you press Tab. Usually. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. select By View. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the main duct. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Values Displayed. for Color Scheme.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. thus it is not part of the system.

25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Flow.Airflow. select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area.Velocity. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click OK. select the WSHP. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. for Schemes. and on the Options Bar. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 26 Click OK. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Duct Color Fill . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

and select 16". click Cancel. for Branch Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Under Constraints. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Restrict Height. Select Only. and then click to select it.08 in-wg/100ft. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only. Click OK. and drag it to the right. select Friction. and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). highlight a segment of the duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated.

pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Using this tool.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. static pressure. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 35 Click Finish. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select the WSHP.

for Offset. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the top right diffuser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top. Front. NOTE When drawing duct. and click Draw Duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. right-click the connector grip.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2". 15 On the ViewCube. double-click MEP .

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). in space 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Also. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. it is considered a closed loop.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area. The ductwork is automatically created. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. 30 Press Esc twice. and click to select it.

36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and then click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Using the same method. such as a plenum. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical . for Flow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. under Constraints. and click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct.

you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. Automatically and manually lay out piping.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. In this lesson. 109 . This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Create return and supply piping systems. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.

you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.

7 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. in corridor 328. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. verify that Wall faces is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Horizontal .HVAC Plan .2-6 Tons .Design is highlighted.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Left Return . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and select WSHP .High Efficiency . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.

as shown. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and enter 2'.8 Click the corridor wall face. and in the Type Selector. 10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. enter 9'. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. enter 12 GPM. as shown. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . for Water Flow. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. select the 2 WSHPs. for Offset.

including flow and pressure. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.21 Click Modify. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Creating a Piping System | 115 . right-click the Systems column heading. where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Unlike logical connections (systems). and click View ➤ Piping.Mech 330). 5 In the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Therefore. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the 2 WSHPs. As you assign equipment to systems. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.In the System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. while pressing Ctrl. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. for System Name. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

for System Name. You have created the hydronic return system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 17 On the Options Bar.Design. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.HVAC Plan .13 Click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ HVAC . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 .

24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. In cooling mode. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and click OK. 28 Using the same method. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In heating mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Expand All. and bypasses the cooling tower. and click Select. indicating the logical connection. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand the Hydronic Return system category. 23 Close the roof plan view. 25 Select the boiler. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. The hydronic supply system highlights in red.

30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. expand Piping. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK. and click Properties. under Mechanical.In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Column Settings.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Mech 330). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to select it. click Training Files. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).HVAC Plan . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). the boiler. When you draw a box to select components. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. click Check None. and click OK. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . you can place the cursor over a system component. select Mechanical Equipment. 5 In the Filter dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). press Tab to highlight the system. then the Select a System dialog displays.rvt. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 9 In the Select a System dialog. A system preview displays in red. 10 Click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. indicating that it’s the active view. select CHWR.Design is highlighted. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that Solutions is selected. click Settings. For Inset. structural beams. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. duct. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. or architectural components. enter 1' 6''.11 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select Perimeter. It does not reference the architecture. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 13 Click Cancel. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. the flow for one WSHP is 18. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and the flow for the other is 12. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.

23 Under Mechanical. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access its instance properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and click OK. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler. under Mechanical.

Logically.Design ➤ Floor Plans. which propagates flow throughout the system. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 28 In the Project Browser. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next. double-click Level 1 .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Number of Elements is now 8. On the Options Bar. you physically close the CHWR loop.

note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. under Mechanical. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 35 Using the drag control. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and click Cancel. as shown. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. access its instance properties. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 38 Using the same method. select a WSHP. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area.

40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Click Settings. 41 Click OK. enter 0''/12''. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. For Slope. select CHWS.

In a later exercise. as shown. as shown. 46 Click Modify.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

51 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Either relocate the system components. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. To create the piping system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Add piping to close the supply loop.50 Using the same method. or offset elevations are incorrect.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.Design ➤ 3D Views. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. As you work in the training file. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta.rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files.Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

6 Press Delete. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. The connections are automatically created.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the return pipe riser. and click OK. 12 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.

and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down.7''. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and press Enter. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. for Offset. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 1' . and you select 1 connector. enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. as shown. select the primary base mounted pump. and select it.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created.

and when the connector point displays. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. click to connect to the pump. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 28 Press Esc.

33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. enter 4'. right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

enter 9' 6''. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ Move the cursor down.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset.

Next. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 40 Click Cancel. and click Element Properties. select the cooling tower. under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 43 Press Esc. 41 Using the same method. and click OK. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 42 Click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 48 In the plan view.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 46 Press Esc. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. Connect the cooling tower Next. right-click.50 or 50% of the Flow. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). for Cooling Water Flow. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. the value is 0 GPM. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 44 In the 3D view.

49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).50 In the 3D View. and close the dialog. When the valve is open. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. The bypass valve is closed by default. and select Ball Valve . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown.Design is highlighted.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method.

verify that Flow is 0 GPM. under Mechanical. 20 Select the bypass valve. and click OK. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. 19 Using the same method.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Adding Valves | 145 . right-click. and click Element Properties.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and select Ball Valve . You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

22 Using the method you just learned. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Design is highlighted. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Initially.

for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Flow. Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. select Pipe Color Fill . click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.

and enter 2. Select And. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Larger of Connector and Calculated. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Friction. for Branch Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and for Velocity.25 FT/100ft. and click to select the branch. 13 Press Esc. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 5 FPS. Under Constraints. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.rvt. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. select a different layout solution. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. or offset elevations are incorrect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 149 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. pressure. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

An inspection flag reports the section number. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure information including pressure loss. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. This information helps you modify the system design. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. targeting those systems that need attention. for Fluid Temperature.67 psi. the Static Pressure is 7. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. In this exercise. you need to validate them. inspect Section 6 again. and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. 9 Using the same method.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and to size pipe. as shown. and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.89 psi.88 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.

right-click the Systems titlebar. 7 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). In the System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. After you have assigned all components to systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3 . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.Design. thus assigning the components to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. As you learned when placing components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 6 In the Project Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. double-click Level 1 . and click Show to view all of the system components. and click View. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. For example. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 4 In the System Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the pipe is associated with that system.HVAC Plan . NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Warnings display. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. After you assign components to a system.rvt. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and for pipe sizing. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.

10 Using the same methods.TIP If you have multiple views open. and confirm unassigned system components. right-click Hydronic Return. otherwise. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Expand All. 13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and select Level 3 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.HVAC Plan . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Wire Sizes. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. speeding up the design phase.rvt. For Material. enter THHN. expand Wiring . select Copper. wiring. select 75.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 1. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. As you place components and create circuits. Click OK. select 90. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.04. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ For Material. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. ■ ■ For Factor. For Temperature. Select Correction Factor. distribution systems. select Wiring Types. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Copper. click (Open). 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . You also add a wiring type. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Temperature Rating.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ For Value. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. for Custom Colors.

power circuits. Create power loads. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. 167 . and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color for Less Than 20. In the Color dialog. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. for Basic Colors. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for the Spaces Category. By using orange as the color for this range. click Training Files. select the color legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 fc. select Orange. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination.00 fc. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.rvt.

Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling plan. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 8 In the Project Browser. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The red field will clear once the +/. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.7 In the Project Browser. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range is satisfied. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.277.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Multiple. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 18 Click to place the fixture. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click OK. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 28 In the drawing area.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select Multiple. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the 3 fixtures.

32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. 36 In the Filter dialog.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

click the ceiling grid line as shown. The lighting delta is satisfied. 42 In the drawing area.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar.277V. select Multiple Alignment. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

■ Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. select 463T5_S.93. select Xenon and click OK. In the Select File dialog. enter . In the Name dialog. for Lamp. enter 162. enter . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.277V and click OK.85. enter F15.ies and click Open. Under Electrical. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . specify 15000. and click OK. ■ Click Apply. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Color Preset. click the value for Initial Intensity. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ Click OK twice. for Type Mark. click the value for Initial Color. Click OK. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.00 VA. for Apparent Load. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 lm. select Luminous Flux. Under Identity Data. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. click Check None. 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and receptacles to your design. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes. you add switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the next exercise. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.Press Delete.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

The element type Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

zoom to space Library 219. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . NOTE When entering values. Under Electrical.14 Press ESC to end the command. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type. for Mark. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. note the Number of Poles is 1. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Offset. enter 9’0”.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Level 2 . 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Load. Placing Switches.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Click OK. Expand General. Select Size. right-click and click Column Settings. 24 For any column. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Space Number. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage. Junction Boxes. 23 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. Distribution System. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 26 In the System Browser.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar. and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). click Training Files.rvt. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. #1 Pole Breakers.Surface: 100A.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. select 120/208 Wye. 14 Select the panelboard. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. For Panel Name.Loads. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .

zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. which is the logical connection between the elements.Loads. enter 20. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. For Panel Name. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 23 In the Filter dialog. enter LP-2B. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 32 Press ESC.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Click OK. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2. except without wire. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Next you create circuits without showing wire. and for Category.Loads. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 41 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. click (Open). click Check None.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and verify that Load. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Rating. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 2 In the drawing area. Voltage. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . ■ 16 In the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Expand Electrical. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.rvt. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. click Training Files. and then expand circuit 1. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Distribution System.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 22 With the junction box still selected. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 30 Close the System Browser. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. under Electrical. change the Voltage to 277V.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. enter FR4.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Tags. click below the first one to place it. Click OK. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 47 In the drawing area. click Edit Type. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. for Type Mark. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 35 Press ESC to end the command.

Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Break. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click Save.rfa. Next you create a switch system. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. for File Name. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 56 In the Filter dialog. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and for Category. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. For Circuit Number. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter a comma. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Check None.

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. under Electrical Lighting. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. enter a.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. for Switch ID. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. click Training Files. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open). 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical . enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.Lighting.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Circuits are used for power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i.26 Close the file with or without saving it. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Click OK.rvt. select Electrical Fixtures. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and data systems. click Check None. click Training Files. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). lighting. 7 In space Electrical 220. click (Open). and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

enter 2. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the drawing area. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . and click Open. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Select the wire again. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. for Hot Conductors. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.rfa. and in the right pane. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 19 Click OK.

as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.26 Press Delete.

zoom to space Electrical 220. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. click Open. Finally.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click Training Files. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Next you balance the loads for your design.rvt. select panel LP-2B. 3 In the Electrical space.

6 Click OK. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. B. and Phase C . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.3712 VA. 1-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. Scroll down. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. enter 30A. 1-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.3616 VA). 1-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. click Rebalance Loads. and Phase C provides 2028 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 14 Close the warning dialog. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. for Rating.

3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. for Rating. enter 25A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rating. and click OK. 17 Close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .Loads. Click OK. enter 30A. Next you create a panel schedule.15 Select panel PP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. and click OK. click Training Files. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. under Electrical . Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. under Electrical . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. click (Open). Select PP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.

5 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open E601 . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. select Berlin Sans FB.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 6 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 3/32. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Sheets (all). click Training Files. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 11 Click OK twice. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. select Bold and Italic. enter 1/8. for Font. 4 Close the report. 7 Select the schedule. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Header Text. click Edit.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Body Text. under Other. click (Open). for Font Size. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Unassigned. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Checking Your Design | 215 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. each with a load of 180VA. In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

3 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 219 . Adding a pipe size. you create a PVC pipe type. In this exercise. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In this lesson.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. planning is critical to a successful design. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click OK. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. right-click PVC . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Sanitary. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 4 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.Vent. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in addition to loading existing families.rvt. and click Properties. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. type PVC .

select Sanitary.Vent is listed.PVC . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Modify.DWV: Standard.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . select Branch. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. For Offset. and click OK.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 For Outside. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter -4' . under Mechanical. 24 For Inside Diameter. Tap. select Tee Vent . select Plastic. click Training Files. 27 For the new pipe size. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 5/8''. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.0''. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. enter 10°. Cross. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. enter 1/2''. 17 In the left pane. 18 For System Type. 6 Click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for Nominal. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 13 In the right panel. and click Main. select None. 15 For System Type. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.rfa. 22 Click New Size.PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Tee.Sch 40 . Tee. 21 In the right pane.DWV. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 26 Click OK.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Pipe Settings. under Pipe Types. enter 27/32''. In the Project Browser. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. PVC . for Material. select Sanitary. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 10 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 .

sanitary piping. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. add a hot water heater. 221 . you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

Plumbing Plan . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . including the men’s room (space Male 107). and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. click Training Files.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.rvt. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 urinal. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. you add 2 toilets. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.

1. 1 wall-mounted urinal. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. under Water Closet .Flush Valve . and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select Public .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Wall Mounted.6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. against the left wall. 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel. as shown. in the Type Selector.

10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.Wall Hung. above the first in the standard toilet space. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. and press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in closer. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.7 Click to place another toilet. (Again. under Urinal .

select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. under Floor Drain . 12 On the Placement panel. In placing the fixture. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . click Place on Face.Rectangular.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Click Modify.

and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and a floor drain. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. a urinal. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). right-click in the System Browser table heading. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. click Training Files.

Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and click OK. and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design is open. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>). Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

11 On the Options Bar. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You include the bathroom space number in the name. enter Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser. so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. for System Name. expand Sanitary.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. If you deselected the drain. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. select Sanitary 107. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. as shown. select one of the components in the system. and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays. a toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

You accept this suggested solution. enter -1' 0''. 25 On the Options Bar. for Slope. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Intersections. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter -4'-0”. 26 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select 4''. enter -1' 0''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The default settings are automatically modified. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 For Offset. for Solution Type. and click OK. for Diameter. 24 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and for Offset. for Offset. select Branch. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click Settings. and modify it to meet project requirements. 27 Click Modify. click Solutions. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Main. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.19 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.

click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

under Lavatory . in the Type Selector.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).rvt.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select 22''x22'' . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 5 On the Placement panel. 4 On the Element panel. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Public.Rectangular. and verify that Level 1 . as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

8 Select the sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. select Multiple. enter 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. For example. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line.7 Click Modify. TIP When entering dimensions. and press Enter to create a second sink.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area.

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 22 In the plan view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. as shown. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 19 In the 3D view. with the tee fitting selected. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee.In the System Browser. and click Draw Pipe. double-click 3D Plumbing. use the ViewCube to orient the view. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

press Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example. for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. When you press the Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. enter 2' . NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.6''. and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope. and click to draw the pipe.

move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. 30 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . under Wye 45 Deg Double .Sch 40 . 31 Click Modify.PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. select Standard.

242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 1'. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''. for Offset. 34 Press Esc. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. In the next steps. on the Options Bar.

41 Using the same method. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

right-click the bottom connector.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 6''. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Esc. press Spacebar.

You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view.DWV. 56 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 55 In the 3D view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 51 In the Type Selector. select the P-Trap on the left. under Trap P . select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

Click Modify. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. Select the double wye pipe on the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.. Click in the plan view. 58 Using the same method. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Move the cursor to the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Enter. connect the right sink to the double wye. In the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

In the Type Selector. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.

64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Training Files. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 62 On the Options Bar.rvt. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. and verify the slope. click Finish. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. as shown.Design. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 5 Select the tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. 9 In the Type Selector. and click the intersection to place the fitting. select the elbow fitting on the right. 3 In the Section view.Floor level line.PVC . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Overall. click Modify. 7 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the vertical stack.Design. 10 In the 3D view.Plumbing Plan . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.DWV. select Standard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click the top connector. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click to draw the pipe.

and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 14 On the Options Bar. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Plug . 17 In the Type Selector.11 Click Modify.PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once. 15 Press Esc. for Offset. select Standard. 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 . 12 Select the fitting. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. as shown. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. enter 1'-0”.

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 4 In the right pane. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Branch. 17 In the Filter dialog. 15 In the plan view.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Domestic Hot Water. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and sinks. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and click OK. expand Unassigned.) 10 Click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 In the left pane. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. if necessary. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 14 In the System Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Domestic Hot Water. for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views.Overall. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. enter 9' 3''. 6 In the left pane. for System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Domestic Cold Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. For Offset. select Branch. For Offset. and for System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. urinal. select Main. minimize the Sanitary system. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. 7 In the left pane. and click Main. verify that the value is 9' 0''. click Check None. select Plumbing Fixtures.

enter DCW 107. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. click Edit System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 19 On the System Tools panel. 21 On the Edit System panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. In the System Browser. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. For Flow Conversion Method. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

and click the connector. For Offset. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 34 In the plan view. enter 7''. for Offset. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the top DCW connector. enter 0”/12”. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. as shown. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 30 In the plan view. 37 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. connect the second toilet. enter 4'0”. enter 10'. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right.25 Using the same method. for Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. select 3/4''. 35 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Options Bar. click to the left of the urinal. and press Enter. For Slope. select Water.2 7/8''. and click to place the pipe. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. select the sink above the urinal. as shown. enter 3' . 33 Click Modify. under Pipe Types.

42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click to connect to the main cold water line. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click OK. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

rvt. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design is open. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the 3 sinks. and verify that Level 1 . expand the Unassigned folder. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser. while pressing Ctrl. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Overall.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

6 Gallon. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 13 In the plan view. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 15 In the System Browser. Default Domestic Cold Water.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. as shown. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. for System Name. 14 Click Modify. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. you edit the system to add equipment. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the System Browser. and click OK. Default Domestic Hot Water. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. and click Edit System.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). select 0. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. in the Unassigned folder.Tankless. In later steps. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. When designing systems. under Water Heater . a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

23 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. and on the Edit System panel. for Offset. as shown. and select Draw Pipe. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 10’. enter 1' 6''. right-click the middle left connector. 19 Select the water heater. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater. 27 Click Modify. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 26 Move the cursor to the right. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. 25 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 24 Move the cursor up. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and press Enter. Slope: 0''/12''.

and for Offset. and press Enter. enter 1' 6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Edit System panel. 30 On the System Tools panel. enter 1''. enter 9' 0''. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Offset. for Diameter. 37 On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click Draw Pipe. click Edit System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and in the System Selector. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Finish Editing System. select 4'-6''. 36 Move the cursor down. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify. as shown. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 2 Right-click Standard. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this tutorial. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.autodesk. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. After finishing each exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. However. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You create a new pipe type.rvt. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and click Duplicate. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 267 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

Next. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Carbon Steel. and then click OK. In the next exercise. verify that 9' 0" is specified. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you modify the type properties of the pipe. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. structural beams. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. duct. select Main. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For Offset. select Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. click Rename. under Mechanical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Material. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. However. verify that 9' 0" is selected. For Pipe Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. In the left pane. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. In this exercise. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For System Type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

for Name. select space Instruction 221 as shown.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. enter Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. Under Categories. 6 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Fire Protection. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Plan . enter Zone 1. the space crossing lines display. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and then click OK. under Fire Protection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. right-click. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select the upper half of the building. and click Element Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Add.

you create schedules for sprinkler design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected. 10 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . including a calculated value parameter. select Zone 1. and then click OK. and click OK. and then access instance properties. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. to which you add various parameters. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 2.rvt.

Fire Protection Plan . The schedule displays. select Fire Protection. Select Schedule keys. for Name. 14 Select the new header. select Feet and fractional inches. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 9 On the Formatting tab. For Group parameter under. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Units.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Name. 11 Click OK twice. Obstructed-Combustible. For Rounding. select Spaces. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click Add Parameter. select Maximum Spacing.Design is highlighted. and on the ribbon. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter 15. Click OK. 7 Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Type of Parameter. For Key name. select To the nearest 1'. 6 Using the same method. 10 In the Format dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Light. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Length. indicating that it’s the active view. click the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and click Field Format.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the Maximum Spacing column.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Click OK.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Extra. 16 Using the same method. under Available fields. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and press Enter.

select Number. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. for Sort by. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). under Other. and click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Select Header and Blank line. Click OK. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. and click Field Format. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. click Edit. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click View Properties. select Fixed. Enter the formula operator / after Area. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. click . select Level. For Rounding. for Sorting/Grouping. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. In the Fields dialog. select Area. For Discipline. For Then by. For Formula.

select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. for Filter by. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. For Then by (second instance). select Number. and select Totals only.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then select Hidden field. for Filter. and click View Properties. ■ In the Format dialog. select Hidden field. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. verify that Use default settings is selected. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . right-click the schedule. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. Under Field formatting. 27 In the drawing area. 30 Click OK twice. For Fields. click Edit.

for Available fields. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. For Category. select Embedded Schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Grand totals. double-click Type. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. and select Totals only. and Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. System Name. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. under Other.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. delete the word Maximum. select Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and click View Properties. for Embedded Schedule. for Fields. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select Ordinary. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 48 In the floor plan. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Light. and click OK. and access the instance properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 41 In the plan view. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. As a result.Fire Protection Plan Design.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Unobstructed. double-click FP . under Identity Data. select Ordinary. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

autodesk.rvt. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. However. As you place the sprinklers. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the system. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. click Training Files. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. By following the recommended workflow. and double-click Level 2 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. 279 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. At the end of this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. After placing the initial sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. and select Sprinkler . while pressing Ctrl. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.Pendent . 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area.

and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared.

you adjust the offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. for Offset. under Constraints. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the schedule updates. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. enter 14' 6". 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.Design.FP_Ceiling view. 29 Press Esc. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. open Design ➤ FP . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan .Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 200B. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . specify a vertical offset. and press Enter. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 17 In the Project Browser. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and 200C). 18 Type WT. This number is determined in the schedule. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . move the cursor to the right. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. For Number. enter 10' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". Next. enter 11. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 19 In the floor plan.

you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. However. After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. indicating that it’s the active view. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and with piping (physical connection). You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Unlike logical connections (systems). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In the next exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. named Fire Protection Wet. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and select Piping. In the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.

place the cursor over a sprinkler. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. click Settings. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. press Tab. and on the Options Bar. enter FP Wet_Zone2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and a piping layout preview displays. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 15 In the drawing area. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select Branch. indicating the logical connection. select an initial piping layout.Wet is selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. For Pipe Type. For Offset. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. 12 On the Options Bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. system equipment.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. In the left pane. and click Select. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 11 With the system still selected. for System Name. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Main is selected. Next. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. providing system editing tools. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 13 In the System Browser. 19 Click OK.

enter -12' 0". verify that Network is selected. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . select 2". as shown. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and green represents branch lines). When the layout is finished. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. and select solution 5. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Place Base. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 23 For Offset. 22 On the Options Bar.20 On the Generate Layout panel. In general. for Diameter.

On the Generate Layout panel. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 29 Click Finish Layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . select a different layout solution.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Next. and then you create piping to physically connect them. or manually modify the pipe. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Either relocate the system components. and various manual pipe creation tools. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 3 If necessary.rvt. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and pipe or duct is created. verify that Solutions is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. 8 In the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 14 Close the System Browser. mechanical equipment. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 13 Click Finish Layout. air terminals. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and select solution 5. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. radiators. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. or a system component to display system tools. 18 Click Finish Editing System. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. for Solution Type.

select 9'. 24 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 27 On the Options Bar. and then tile the views. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then press Esc. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 25 Select the sprinkler. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . right-click. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. double-click on the section head to open the section view. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ 6 Press Esc. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1'-0". click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4".

25 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. The pipe diameter is modified. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown. as shown. and maximize the floor plan. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method.

and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you created a wet fire protection system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You added tags to pipes. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. In this exercise. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. 305 .

306 .

right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and view references.rvt.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. click Training Files. right-click Level 1. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. matchlines. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. 307 . right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. dependent views. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. If the view included detail graphics. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and apply a view template. under Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. as shown. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 10 In the drawing area. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. and click OK. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. create dependent views for areas B and C.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 9 Click OK. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. click Training Files. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. views and put them on the sheet. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. to delineate splits in a large floor plan.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Rename. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. more focused. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 14 Click Finish Matchline. Click OK./ ---). select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Pattern. 21 Using the same method. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. on the Options Bar. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the Color dialog. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. click the current value. select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and click OK. for Target view. select 11. For Line Weight.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 19 In the drawing area.

indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. 27 Using the same method. and zoom to each of the view references. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

and click Properties. Click OK. select Documentation. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . for View Name. select Plumbing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and select the section box. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 2 Zoom in.Domestic Water. Under Graphics. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. for View Classification. enter Plumbing Isometric . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 4 In the Project Browser. For Sub-Discipline. select Plumbing Isometric. and click to select it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display. For Default View Template. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.Domestic Water. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select 3. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. 12 Using the same method. Click Apply. and click to select it. and then click OK. select Dash. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 14 Right-click. and click to select it.

■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Reveal Hidden Elements. In the drawing area. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Domestic Water view with detailing. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.15 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. On the View Control Bar.

24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 21 Click OK twice.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. as shown. 25 Press Esc twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. verify that Common is selected. When the view is associated with a sheet. For Slope. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. select To the nearest 1/8". 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click on the Format value. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Creating Callout Views | 315 . for Rounding. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. click Training Files. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.

under Sheets (all).8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. double-click M601 . using the same method. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 . drag it to the sheet. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Click OK.

for View Name. and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. right-click the callout view. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

and click OK. under Names. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Rename. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click Apply View Template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.

linetypes. duct tags. and annotation to create a legend. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components. 321 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. symbols.

double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. 8 With the text still selected. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. Creating Annotations | 323 . select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct. 15 On the Options Bar.

select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. under Category. for Ducts. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. 22 In the Tags dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 20 In the Tags dialog. 24 On the Options Bar.rfa. 17 Click Modify. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. If necessary. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Load.

25 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Creating Annotations | 325 . and then press Esc. Leader. 31 On the Options Bar. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. and Attached End. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. 32 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader.

37 In the drawing area. lay out. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. not simply an instance property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 40 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and click OK. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and lock lighting fixtures.36 Press Esc twice. select the last tag placed. and all elements of that type are affected. you use temporary dimensions to locate. select Dot Open 1/16".

and then select the interior face of the wall. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. On the Options Bar. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.rvt. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 12 Press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

13 Using the same method. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. linework. and offset them 8' from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.3 1/2"). Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Legend | 329 . annotation symbols. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . enter 8'. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 19 Using the same methods. and press Enter. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Because the dimensions are locked. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.

and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck. select Floor Plan. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Using the same method. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Click OK. select 1/4" = 1' -0". enter Diffuser Legend.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser.

11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 21 Press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 26 Press Esc. and then press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.

enter E. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 333 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 34 Using the method learned previously.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Detailing 15 In this lesson.rvt. and text. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 335 . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.113 East elevation view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.

336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 8 Using the same method. place Power Riser . and click to place it.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Next. select each of the 2 panelboards. 4 On the Options Bar. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Deactivate View. for Title on Sheet. and click Activate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. under Identity Data. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click. and click OK.

19 Select the Level 1 line. 22 Press Esc. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. as shown. and click Activate View. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the 113 East elevation view. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.

In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. as shown. select 6. for Line Weight. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Under Modify Subcategories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .113 North view. click New. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected. In the New Subcategory dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. click Training Files. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Close the Project Browser. and click OK. notice that there are no snaps active. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. As you draw. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . expand Lines.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown.

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 28 Click above the cap. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

5. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 3/32". You enter exact values for each line length. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.36 Press Esc. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.

and then press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 46 In the Project Browser.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and click OK. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 47 In the drawing area.125. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter 0 0. enter Ground. 50 With the group selected.25. click on the length dimension value. for Name. while pressing Ctrl. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. expand Groups ➤ Detail. select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. Press Esc. Using the same method. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 52 Select the detail group.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and will place it on sheet E01. and click Rename. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Zoom in to view the section. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 2 Right-click the copy. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.

and then click the corner where the Top. and then press Esc. Back. and Left sides converge. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube.

Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Click OK. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Walkthroughs.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click Apply View Template. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. as shown. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). (Right). Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 19 Complete the text labels. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.

under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 25 Click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

select the isometric view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Place a detail component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.29 In the drawing area. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 3 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. click Training Files. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the view name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). For Scale. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 9 Zoom in to the component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". for Sub-Discipline. 13 In the drawing area. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. 12 On the Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. for Type. 22 Click Modify. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Concrete.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and click OK. select the filled region. and then press Esc. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 20 Select 1. 23 In the drawing area.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. select C.I. 21 In the drawing area. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. (Line). 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.P.

32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.28 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click to select them. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab. as shown. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 52 In the Create Group dialog. as shown. and click OK. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify. and then click to select them. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. press Tab to highlight the chain.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. draw wide detail lines as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. for Name.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc.

360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 71 Click Modify. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. as shown. and then click OK. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 64 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.

and click to specify the text insertion point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 80 Press Esc twice. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown.

and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.

dwg. For A-----NPP. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. for Line Weight. select 3.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Black and White. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. you import a CAD detail drawing. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. click Training Files. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Auto-Detect. Click Open. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Colors. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select Visible. For Import units.rvt.

Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .8 Type ZF. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 11 Press Esc. select the viewport title. open P103 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful